1 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 \# Copyright 1996-2010 The NASM Authors - All Rights Reserved
4 \# See the file AUTHORS included with the NASM distribution for
5 \# the specific copyright holders.
7 \# Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
8 \# modification, are permitted provided that the following
11 \# * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
12 \# notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
13 \# * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
14 \# copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
15 \# disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
16 \# with the distribution.
18 \# THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
19 \# CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
20 \# INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
21 \# MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
22 \# DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
23 \# CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
24 \# SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
25 \# NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
26 \# LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
27 \# HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
28 \# CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
29 \# OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
30 \# EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
32 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
34 \# Source code to NASM documentation
36 \M{category}{Programming}
37 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
39 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
40 \M{copyright_tail}{-- All Rights Reserved}
41 \M{license}{This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "LICENSE" distributed in the NASM archive.}
42 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
45 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
46 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
52 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
53 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
54 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
55 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
56 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
57 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
78 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
79 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
80 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
83 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
84 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
86 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
88 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
90 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
92 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
94 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
95 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
96 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
98 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
100 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
101 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
102 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
103 \IR{^} \c{^} operator
104 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
105 \IR{|} \c{|} operator
106 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
107 \IR{~} \c{~} operator
108 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
110 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
111 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
112 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
113 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
114 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
115 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
116 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
117 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
118 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
119 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
121 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
122 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
123 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
124 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
126 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
127 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
128 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
129 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
130 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
131 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
132 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
134 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
135 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
136 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
137 \IA{command line}{command-line}
138 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
139 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
140 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
141 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
142 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
143 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
145 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
146 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
147 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
148 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
151 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
152 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
154 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
155 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
156 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
157 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
159 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
160 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
163 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
164 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
165 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
166 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
167 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
169 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
170 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
171 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
173 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
174 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
175 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
177 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
178 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
179 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
180 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
181 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
182 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
183 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
184 \IR{logical and} logical AND
185 \IR{logical or} logical OR
186 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
187 \IR{mach object file format} Mach, object file format
189 \IR{macho32} \c{macho32}
190 \IR{macho64} \c{macho64}
193 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
195 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
196 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
197 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
198 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
199 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
200 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
202 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
203 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
205 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
209 \IR{operating system} operating system
211 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
212 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
217 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
218 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
219 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
220 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
221 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
222 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
223 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
224 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
226 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
227 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
228 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
229 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
230 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
231 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
232 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
233 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
234 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
235 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
236 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
237 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
238 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
240 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
241 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
242 \IA{sectalign}{sectalign}
243 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
244 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
245 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
246 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
247 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
249 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
255 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
256 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
257 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
258 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
259 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
260 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
261 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
263 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
264 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
265 \IR{www page} WWW page
269 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
270 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
271 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
272 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
273 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
274 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
275 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
278 \C{intro} Introduction
280 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
282 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
283 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
284 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
285 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
286 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
287 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
288 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
289 strong support for macros.
292 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
294 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
295 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
296 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
297 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
299 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
300 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
302 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
303 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
304 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
305 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
306 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
309 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
310 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
312 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
315 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
316 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
317 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
318 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
319 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
321 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
322 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
323 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
324 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
325 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
326 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
330 \S{legal} \i{License} Conditions
332 Please see the file \c{LICENSE}, supplied as part of any NASM
333 distribution archive, for the license conditions under which you may
334 use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called 2-clause BSD license, also
335 known as the simplified BSD license.
337 Copyright 1996-2010 the NASM Authors - All rights reserved.
339 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
340 modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
343 \b Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
344 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
346 \b Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
347 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
348 documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
350 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
351 CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
352 INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
353 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
354 DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
355 CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
356 SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
357 NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
358 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
359 HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
360 CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
361 OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
362 EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
365 \H{contact} Contact Information
367 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
368 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
369 (see below for the link).
370 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
372 NASM has a \i{website} at
373 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}. If it's not there,
376 \i{New releases}, \i{release candidates}, and \I{snapshots, daily
377 development}\i{daily development snapshots} of NASM are available from
378 the official web site.
380 Announcements are posted to
381 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
383 \W{http://www.freshmeat.net/}\c{http://www.freshmeat.net/}.
385 If you want information about the current development status, please
386 subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list; see link from the
390 \H{install} Installation
392 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
394 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
395 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
396 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
397 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
399 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
400 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
401 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
404 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
405 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
406 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
407 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
408 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
409 under other versions of Windows as well.)
411 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
412 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
413 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
414 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
416 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
417 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
418 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
419 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
422 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
423 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
424 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
425 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
426 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
427 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
428 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
429 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
432 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
434 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
435 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
436 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
437 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
438 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
440 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
441 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
442 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
443 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
446 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
447 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
448 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
449 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
450 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
451 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
452 install the programs yourself.
454 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
455 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
456 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
457 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
460 \C{running} Running NASM
462 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
464 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
466 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
470 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
472 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
474 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
476 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
478 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
479 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
480 to give a listing file name, for example:
482 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
484 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
488 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
491 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
496 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
497 installed it). If it says something like
499 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
501 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
502 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
504 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
506 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
507 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
508 and are rare these days.)
510 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
511 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
515 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
517 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
518 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
519 For Microsoft object file formats (\c{obj}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}),
520 it will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
521 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
522 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\c{aout}, \c{as86},
523 \c{coff}, \c{elf32}, \c{elf64}, \c{ieee}, \c{macho32} and \c{macho64})
524 it will substitute \c{.o}. For \c{dbg}, \c{rdf}, \c{ith} and \c{srec},
525 it will use \c{.dbg}, \c{.rdf}, \c{.ith} and \c{.srec}, respectively,
526 and for the \c{bin} format it will simply remove the extension, so
527 that \c{myfile.asm} produces the output file \c{myfile}.
529 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
530 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
531 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
533 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
534 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
535 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
536 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
537 an intervening space. For example:
539 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
540 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
542 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
543 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
546 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
548 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
549 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
550 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
551 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
552 choose what you want the default to be.
554 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
555 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
557 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
558 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
561 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
563 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
564 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
565 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
566 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
567 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
568 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
571 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
573 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
574 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
575 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
576 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
577 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
580 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
582 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
583 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
585 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
588 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
590 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
591 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
592 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
593 dependency list without a prefix.
596 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
598 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
599 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
601 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
604 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
606 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
607 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
608 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
609 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
610 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
612 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
615 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
617 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
618 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
619 specified by the \c{-o} option.
622 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
624 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
625 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
626 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
630 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
632 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
633 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
634 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
635 file has been removed.
638 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
640 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
641 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
642 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
643 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
644 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
645 if \c{-F} is specified.
647 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
648 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
649 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
651 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
652 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
653 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
656 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
658 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
659 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
660 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
661 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
662 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
665 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
667 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
668 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
670 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
671 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
672 the default and looks like this:
674 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
676 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
677 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
678 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
679 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
680 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
682 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
683 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
685 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
687 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
688 instead of being delimited by colons.
690 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
692 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
694 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
695 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
696 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
697 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
698 example) you want to load them into an editor.
700 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
701 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
702 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
703 the errors into a file by typing
705 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
707 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
708 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
709 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
711 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
713 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
714 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
715 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
716 program, you can type:
718 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
720 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
723 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
725 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
726 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
727 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
728 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
729 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
730 library}, for example, by typing
732 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
734 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
737 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
738 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
739 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
740 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
741 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
742 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
744 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
745 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
746 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
748 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
749 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
750 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
753 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
754 be specified as \c{-I}.
757 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
759 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
760 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
763 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
765 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
766 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
768 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
769 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
772 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
774 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
775 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
776 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
779 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
781 as an alternative to placing the directive
785 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
786 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
787 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
788 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
791 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
792 be specified as \c{-D}.
795 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
797 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
798 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
799 option specified earlier on the command lines.
801 For example, the following command line:
803 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
805 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
806 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
809 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
810 be specified as \c{-U}.
813 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
815 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
816 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
817 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
818 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
819 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
820 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
822 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
823 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
824 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
826 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
828 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
830 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
831 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
832 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
834 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
836 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
837 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
838 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
839 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
840 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
841 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
844 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
846 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
847 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
849 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
850 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
851 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
853 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
854 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
855 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
856 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
858 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
859 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
860 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
861 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatibility with earlier
862 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
863 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
865 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses, and is the default
868 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
869 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
872 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} Option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
874 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
875 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
877 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
879 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
880 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
881 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
882 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
883 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
886 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
887 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
888 \c{include}, \c{local})
890 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} and \i\c{-W} Options: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
892 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
893 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
894 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
895 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
896 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
897 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
900 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
901 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
902 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
903 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
904 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
905 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
906 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
908 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
910 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
911 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
912 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
913 you might want to disable it.
915 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
916 warning class is disabled by default.
918 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
919 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
920 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
922 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
923 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
924 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
925 see \k{syntax} for more information.
927 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
928 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
930 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
931 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
932 This warning class is disabled by default.
934 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
937 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
940 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
943 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
946 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
949 \b \i\c{error} causes warnings to be treated as errors. Disabled by
952 \b \i\c{all} is an alias for \e{all} suppressible warning classes (not
953 including \c{error}). Thus, \c{-w+all} enables all available warnings.
955 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
956 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
957 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
958 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
959 (without the brackets) exists.
961 Since version 2.00, NASM has also supported the gcc-like syntax
962 \c{-Wwarning} and \c{-Wno-warning} instead of \c{-w+warning} and
963 \c{-w-warning}, respectively.
966 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
968 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
969 and the date on which it was compiled.
971 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
973 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
975 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
976 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
977 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
981 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
982 \c ('*' denotes default):
983 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
984 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
987 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
989 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
990 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
991 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
992 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
993 (but not always) likes it.
996 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
998 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
999 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
1000 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
1001 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
1002 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
1004 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
1005 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib\\} will be treated as two separate options.
1006 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
1007 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
1008 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
1009 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
1011 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
1012 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
1013 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
1014 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
1015 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib\\} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
1016 -ic:\\nasmlib\\}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
1018 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
1019 changed with version 0.98.31.
1022 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
1024 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
1025 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
1026 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
1027 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
1028 skipping this section.
1031 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
1033 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
1034 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
1035 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
1036 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
1037 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
1038 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
1039 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
1042 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
1044 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
1045 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
1046 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
1047 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
1048 if you declare, for example,
1053 then the two lines of code
1058 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
1059 identical-looking syntaxes.
1061 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
1062 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
1063 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1064 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1065 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1066 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1067 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1068 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1070 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1071 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1072 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1073 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1074 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1075 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1077 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1078 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1079 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1080 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1081 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1082 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1083 \e{everything} is a label.
1085 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1086 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1087 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1088 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1089 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1090 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1093 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1095 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1096 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1097 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1098 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1099 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1100 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1101 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1103 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1104 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1105 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1106 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1107 the strings being manipulated.
1110 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1112 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1113 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1114 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1115 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1118 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1120 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1121 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1122 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1123 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1124 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1125 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1126 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1127 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1128 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1132 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1134 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1135 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1136 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1137 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1139 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1140 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1141 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1142 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1145 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1147 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1148 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1150 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1151 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1152 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1153 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1154 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1155 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1156 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1158 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1159 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1163 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1165 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1167 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1168 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1169 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1171 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1173 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1174 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1175 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1176 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1178 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1179 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1180 backslash-ended line.
1182 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1183 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1184 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1185 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1186 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1187 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1188 NASM with the command-line option
1189 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1190 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1192 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1193 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1194 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1195 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1196 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1197 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1198 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1199 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1200 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1201 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1203 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1204 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1205 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1206 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1207 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1208 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1209 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1210 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1211 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1212 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1213 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1214 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1215 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1216 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1219 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1220 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1221 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1223 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1224 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1226 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1227 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1228 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1229 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1230 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1231 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1233 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1234 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1235 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1237 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1239 For example, you can code:
1241 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1242 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1244 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1245 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1247 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1248 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1249 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1252 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1254 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1255 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1256 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1257 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1258 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1259 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1260 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1264 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1266 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1267 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1268 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1269 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1271 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1272 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1273 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1274 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1275 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1276 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1277 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1278 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1279 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1280 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1281 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1282 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1283 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1285 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1288 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1290 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1291 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1292 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1293 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1294 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1295 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1296 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1297 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1298 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1302 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1303 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1304 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1305 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1307 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1309 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1310 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1311 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1312 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1315 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1316 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1317 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1318 \c ; actually include at most 512
1320 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1321 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1322 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1323 overridden if desired.
1326 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1328 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1329 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1330 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1331 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1334 \c message db 'hello, world'
1335 \c msglen equ $-message
1337 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1338 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1339 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1340 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1341 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1342 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1345 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1347 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1348 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1349 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1352 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1354 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1355 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1356 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1358 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1359 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1361 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1362 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1363 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1367 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1368 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1369 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1371 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1373 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1374 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1375 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1376 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1377 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1380 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1382 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1383 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1384 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1385 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1390 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1391 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1393 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1394 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1396 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1397 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1399 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1402 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1403 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1406 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1407 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1409 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1410 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1411 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1412 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1413 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1414 bytes to store a zero offset.
1416 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1417 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1418 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1419 default segment registers.
1421 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1422 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1423 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1424 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1425 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1426 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1427 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1428 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1429 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1430 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1431 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1433 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1434 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1435 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1436 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1437 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1438 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1439 the offset to be lost.
1441 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1442 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1443 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1444 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1445 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1446 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1448 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1449 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1450 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1451 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1454 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1456 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1457 character, string and floating-point.
1460 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1462 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1463 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1464 suffix \c{H} or \c{X}, \c{D} or \c{T}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} or
1465 \c{Y} for \i{hexadecimal}, \i{decimal}, \i{octal} and \i{binary}
1466 respectively, or you can prefix \c{0x}, for hexadecimal in the style
1467 of C, or you can prefix \c{$} for hexadecimal in the style of Borland
1468 Pascal or Motorola Assemblers. Note, though, that the \I{$,
1469 prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on identifiers (see
1470 \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$} sign must have a
1471 digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter. In addition, current
1472 versions of NASM accept the prefix \c{0h} for hexadecimal, \c{0d} or
1473 \c{0t} for decimal, \c{0o} or \c{0q} for octal, and \c{0b} or \c{0y}
1474 for binary. Please note that unlike C, a \c{0} prefix by itself does
1475 \e{not} imply an octal constant!
1477 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1480 Some examples (all producing exactly the same code):
1482 \c mov ax,200 ; decimal
1483 \c mov ax,0200 ; still decimal
1484 \c mov ax,0200d ; explicitly decimal
1485 \c mov ax,0d200 ; also decimal
1486 \c mov ax,0c8h ; hex
1487 \c mov ax,$0c8 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1488 \c mov ax,0xc8 ; hex yet again
1489 \c mov ax,0hc8 ; still hex
1490 \c mov ax,310q ; octal
1491 \c mov ax,310o ; octal again
1492 \c mov ax,0o310 ; octal yet again
1493 \c mov ax,0q310 ; octal yet again
1494 \c mov ax,11001000b ; binary
1495 \c mov ax,1100_1000b ; same binary constant
1496 \c mov ax,1100_1000y ; same binary constant once more
1497 \c mov ax,0b1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1498 \c mov ax,0y1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1500 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1502 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1503 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1504 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1505 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1506 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1507 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1508 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1511 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1513 \c \' single quote (')
1514 \c \" double quote (")
1516 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1517 \c \? question mark (?)
1525 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1526 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1527 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1528 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1529 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1531 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1532 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1535 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1536 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1538 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1539 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1540 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1543 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1545 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1546 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1548 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1549 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1553 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1554 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1555 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1556 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1557 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1560 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1562 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1563 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1564 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1565 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1566 certain preprocessor directives.
1568 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1569 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1570 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1572 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1573 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1575 And the following are also equivalent:
1577 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1578 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1579 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1581 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1582 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1583 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1584 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1585 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1586 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1588 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1590 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1591 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1592 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1596 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1597 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1599 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1600 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1602 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1603 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1604 an expression context.
1606 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1608 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1609 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1610 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1611 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1612 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1613 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1615 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1616 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1617 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1618 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1619 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant.
1621 NASM also support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x},
1622 hexadecimal digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then
1623 optionally a \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent
1624 in decimal notation. As an extension, NASM additionally supports the
1625 \c{0h} and \c{$} prefixes for hexadecimal, as well binary and octal
1626 floating-point, using the \c{0b} or \c{0y} and \c{0o} or \c{0q}
1627 prefixes, respectively.
1629 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1630 floating-point constants as well.
1634 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1635 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1636 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1637 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1638 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1639 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1640 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1641 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1642 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1643 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1644 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1646 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1647 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1648 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1649 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1650 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1652 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1653 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1654 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1655 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1656 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1657 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1658 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1659 floating-point number, respectively.
1663 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1665 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1666 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1668 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1670 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1671 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1672 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1673 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1674 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1675 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1676 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1677 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1678 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1680 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1681 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1682 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1683 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1685 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1686 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1688 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1690 The \c{%use fp} standard macro package contains a set of convenience
1691 macros. See \k{pkg_fp}.
1693 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1695 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1696 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1697 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1699 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1704 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1705 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1710 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1712 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1713 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1716 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1717 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1718 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1719 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1720 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1721 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1722 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1724 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1725 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1728 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1730 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1731 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1732 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1735 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1737 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1740 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1742 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1745 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1747 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1748 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1749 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1750 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1751 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1754 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1755 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1757 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1761 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1762 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1764 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1765 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1766 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1767 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1768 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1770 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1771 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1773 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1774 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1775 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1778 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1779 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1781 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1782 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1783 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1784 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1785 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1786 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1789 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1791 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1792 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1793 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1794 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1796 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1797 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1798 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1800 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1804 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1806 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1807 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1808 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1809 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1810 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1812 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1814 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1816 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1817 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1819 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1820 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1821 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1822 could code either of
1824 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1825 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1827 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1828 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1831 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1832 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1833 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1835 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1838 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1840 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1841 invent one using the macro processor.
1844 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1846 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1847 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1848 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1849 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1850 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1851 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1852 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1856 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1858 \c push strict dword 33
1860 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1863 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1864 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1867 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1869 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1870 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1871 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1873 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1874 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1875 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1876 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1877 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1879 \c times (label-$) db 0
1880 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1882 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1883 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1884 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1885 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1888 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1889 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1891 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1894 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1895 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1896 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1897 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1898 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1900 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1902 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1903 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1904 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1905 label. So, for example:
1907 \c label1 ; some code
1915 \c label2 ; some code
1923 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1924 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1925 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1926 previous non-local label.
1928 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1929 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1930 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1931 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1932 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1933 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1934 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1937 \c label3 ; some more code
1942 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1943 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1944 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1945 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1946 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1947 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1948 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1949 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1950 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1951 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1953 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1954 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1955 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1956 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1957 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1959 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1961 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1962 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1963 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}),
1964 \c{..imagebase} is used to find out the offset from a base address
1965 of the current image in the \c{win64} output format (see \k{win64pic}).
1966 So just keep in mind that symbols beginning with a double period are
1970 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1972 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1973 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1974 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1975 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1978 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1979 character into a single line. Thus:
1981 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1984 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1987 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1989 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
1991 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
1992 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
1995 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
1996 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
1998 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
2000 which will expand to
2002 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
2004 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
2005 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
2006 not at definition time. Thus the code
2008 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
2013 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
2014 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
2016 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
2017 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
2018 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
2019 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
2020 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
2021 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
2024 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
2025 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
2026 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
2027 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
2030 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
2034 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
2035 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
2036 for an example of its use.
2038 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
2039 macros: if you write
2041 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
2042 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
2044 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
2045 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
2046 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
2051 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
2052 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
2053 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
2055 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
2056 perfectly well define a macro with
2060 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
2064 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
2065 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
2066 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
2068 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
2069 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
2072 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
2074 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
2075 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
2076 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
2077 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
2078 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
2080 Suppose you have the following code:
2083 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2092 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2093 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2094 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2095 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2096 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2099 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2100 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2101 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2103 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2104 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2105 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2109 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2113 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2114 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2115 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2118 \S{indmacro} \i{Macro Indirection}: \I\c{%[}\c{%[...]}
2120 The \c{%[...]} construct can be used to expand macros in contexts
2121 where macro expansion would otherwise not occur, including in the
2122 names other macros. For example, if you have a set of macros named
2123 \c{Foo16}, \c{Foo32} and \c{Foo64}, you could write:
2125 \c mov ax,Foo%[__BITS__] ; The Foo value
2127 to use the builtin macro \c{__BITS__} (see \k{bitsm}) to automatically
2128 select between them. Similarly, the two statements:
2130 \c %xdefine Bar Quux ; Expands due to %xdefine
2131 \c %define Bar %[Quux] ; Expands due to %[...]
2133 have, in fact, exactly the same effect.
2135 \c{%[...]} concatenates to adjacent tokens in the same way that
2136 multi-line macro parameters do, see \k{concat} for details.
2139 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2141 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2142 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2143 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2145 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2146 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2148 As an example, consider the following:
2150 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2152 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2158 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2161 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2162 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2164 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2165 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2167 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2169 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2171 Now the above code can be written as:
2173 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2174 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2176 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2177 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2180 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2182 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2183 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2184 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2185 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2186 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2187 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2191 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2203 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2205 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2206 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2208 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2211 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2213 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2214 example, the following sequence:
2221 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2222 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2224 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2225 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2229 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2231 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2232 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2233 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2234 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2236 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2237 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2238 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2239 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2241 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2242 later, so you can do things like
2246 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2248 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2249 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2250 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2252 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2253 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2254 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2255 involving a register).
2258 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2260 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2261 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2262 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2267 \c %defstr test TEST
2271 \c %define test 'TEST'
2273 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2276 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2279 \S{deftok} Defining Tokens: \I\c{%ideftok}\i\c{%deftok}
2281 \c{%deftok}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ideftok}, define
2282 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2283 second parameter, after string conversion, to a sequence of tokens.
2287 \c %deftok test 'TEST'
2291 \c %define test TEST
2294 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2296 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2297 supports a few simple string handling macro operators from which
2298 more complex operations can be constructed.
2300 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2301 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro. When producing a string
2302 value, it may change the style of quoting of the input string or
2303 strings, and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings.
2305 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2307 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2308 a single-line macro.
2312 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2314 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2317 \c %strcat beta '"foo"\', "'bar'"
2319 ... would assign the value \c{`"foo"\\\\'bar'`} to \c{beta}.
2321 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2324 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2326 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2329 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2331 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2332 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2333 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2334 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2336 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2337 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2339 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2340 assigned the value of 9.
2343 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2345 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2346 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2347 than the description:
2349 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2350 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2351 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2352 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2353 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2354 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2356 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2357 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2358 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2359 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2360 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2361 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2362 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2363 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2364 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2367 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2369 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2370 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2373 \c %macro prologue 1
2381 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2382 invoke the macro with a call such as
2384 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2386 which would expand to the three lines of code
2392 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2393 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2394 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2395 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2396 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2399 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2400 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2402 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2403 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2404 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2413 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2414 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2415 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2418 \S{mlrmacro} \i{Recursive Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%irmacro}\i\c{%rmacro}
2420 A multi-line macro cannot be referenced within itself, in order to
2421 prevent accidental infinite recursion and allow instruction overloading.
2423 Recursive multi-line macros allow for self-referencing, with the
2424 caveat that the user is aware of the existence, use and purpose of
2425 recursive multi-line macros. There is also a generous, but sane, upper
2426 limit to the number of recursions, in order to prevent run-away memory
2427 consumption in case of accidental infinite recursion.
2429 As with non-recursive multi-line macros, recursive multi-line macros are
2430 \i{case-sensitive}, unless you define them using the alternative
2431 directive \c{%irmacro}.
2434 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2436 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2437 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2438 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2439 parameters at all. So you could define
2441 \c %macro prologue 0
2448 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2449 allocates no local stack space.
2451 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2452 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2461 so that you could code
2463 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2464 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2466 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2467 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2468 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2469 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2470 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2471 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2474 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2476 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2477 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2478 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2479 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2480 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2481 flag is set by doing this:
2491 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2492 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2493 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2494 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2495 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2496 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2497 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2498 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2499 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2502 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2504 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2505 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2506 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2507 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2508 you might want to be able to write
2510 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2512 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2513 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2514 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2515 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2518 \c %macro writefile 2+
2524 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2531 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2532 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2533 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2534 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2537 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2538 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2541 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2542 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2543 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2544 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2545 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2546 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2547 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2550 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2551 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2554 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2556 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2557 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2560 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2562 \S{mlmacrange} \i{Macro Parameters Range}
2564 NASM allows you to expand parameters via special construction \c{%\{x:y\}}
2565 where \c{x} is the first parameter index and \c{y} is the last. Any index can
2566 be either negative or positive but must never be zero.
2576 expands to \c{3,4,5} range.
2578 Even more, the parameters can be reversed so that
2586 expands to \c{5,4,3} range.
2588 But even this is not the last. The parameters can be addressed via negative
2589 indices so NASM will count them reversed. The ones who know Python may see
2598 expands to \c{6,5,4} range.
2600 Note that NASM uses \i{comma} to separate parameters being expanded.
2602 By the way, here is a trick - you might use the index \c{%{-1:-1}}
2603 which gives you the \i{last} argument passed to a macro.
2605 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2607 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2608 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2609 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2611 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2619 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2620 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2621 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2622 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2623 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2625 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2626 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2627 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2628 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2630 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2632 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2633 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2634 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2635 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2637 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2638 too many default parameters:
2640 \c %macro quux 1 something
2642 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2644 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2645 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2646 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2647 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2648 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2650 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2651 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2652 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2653 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2654 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2656 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2657 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2658 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2660 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2662 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2663 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2664 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2667 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2669 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2670 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2671 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2672 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2673 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2674 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2677 \S{percent00} \i\c{%00}: \I{label preceeding macro}Label Preceeding Macro
2679 \c{%00} will return the label preceeding the macro invocation, if any. The
2680 label must be on the same line as the macro invocation, may be a local label
2681 (see \k{locallab}), and need not end in a colon.
2684 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2686 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2687 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2688 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2689 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2690 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2691 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2693 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2694 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2695 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2696 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2698 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2699 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2700 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2701 parameters are rotated to the right.
2703 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2704 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2706 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2715 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2716 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2717 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2718 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2719 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2720 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2721 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2723 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2724 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2725 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2727 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2728 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2729 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2730 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2731 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2732 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2733 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2735 This can be done by the following definition:
2737 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2746 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2747 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2748 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2749 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2750 iterated through in reverse order.
2753 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2755 NASM can concatenate macro parameters and macro indirection constructs
2756 on to other text surrounding them. This allows you to declare a family
2757 of symbols, for example, in a macro definition. If, for example, you
2758 wanted to generate a table of key codes along with offsets into the
2759 table, you could code something like
2761 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2763 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2769 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2770 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2771 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2773 which would expand to
2776 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2778 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2780 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2783 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2784 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2786 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2787 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2788 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2789 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2790 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2791 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2792 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2794 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2795 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2796 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2797 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2798 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2799 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2800 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2801 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2802 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2803 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2805 The single-line macro indirection construct, \c{%[...]}
2806 (\k{indmacro}), behaves the same way as macro parameters for the
2807 purpose of concatenation.
2809 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2812 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2814 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2815 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2816 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2817 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2818 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2819 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2822 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2823 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2824 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2825 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2835 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2836 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2837 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2840 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2841 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2842 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2843 because no inverse condition code exists.
2846 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2848 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2849 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2850 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2851 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2852 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2855 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2856 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2857 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2858 the number of parameters, like this:
2860 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2864 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2866 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2868 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2869 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2870 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2871 that argument specification.
2880 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2887 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2888 specification does not match exactly.
2891 \S{exitmacro} Exiting Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%exitmacro}
2893 Multi-line macro expansions can be arbitrarily terminated with
2894 the \c{%exitmacro} directive.
2907 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2909 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2910 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2911 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2914 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2915 \c %elif<condition2>
2916 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2918 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2921 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2923 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2924 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2926 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2927 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2928 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2929 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2931 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2932 single-line macro existence}
2934 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2935 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2936 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2937 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2939 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2942 \c ; perform some function
2944 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2946 \c ; go and do something else
2948 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2949 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2950 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2952 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2953 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2954 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2958 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2959 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2961 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2962 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2964 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2965 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2966 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2969 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2970 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2972 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2974 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2978 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2980 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2986 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2987 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2990 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
2991 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
2992 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
2995 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
2998 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
2999 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
3000 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
3001 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
3002 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
3004 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
3005 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
3008 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
3009 arbitrary numeric expressions}
3011 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
3012 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
3013 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
3014 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
3015 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
3017 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
3018 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
3020 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
3021 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
3022 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
3023 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
3024 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
3025 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
3026 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
3027 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
3028 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
3029 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
3030 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
3031 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
3032 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
3033 for true and 0 for false.
3035 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
3036 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
3038 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
3039 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
3041 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
3042 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
3043 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
3044 Differences in white space are not counted.
3046 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
3048 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
3049 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
3051 \c %macro pushparam 1
3062 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
3063 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
3064 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
3065 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
3067 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
3068 Types\I{testing, token types}
3070 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
3071 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
3072 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
3073 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
3076 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
3077 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
3078 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
3079 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
3080 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
3082 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
3083 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
3085 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
3094 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
3095 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
3106 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
3107 the following two ways:
3109 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
3110 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
3112 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
3113 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
3114 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
3115 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
3117 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
3118 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
3119 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
3120 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
3121 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
3123 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
3124 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
3125 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
3126 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
3128 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
3130 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
3131 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
3132 versus a multi-token sequence.
3134 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
3135 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
3136 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
3142 will assemble the subsequent code, but
3146 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
3147 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
3149 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
3150 variants are also provided.
3152 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
3154 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
3155 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
3156 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
3158 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
3159 variants are also provided.
3161 \S{ifenv} \i\c{%ifenv}: Test If Environment Variable Exists
3163 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifenv} assembles the
3164 subsequent code if and only if the environment variable referenced by
3165 the \c{%!<env>} directive exists.
3167 The usual \i\c{%elifenv}, \i\c\{%ifnenv}, and \i\c{%elifnenv}
3168 variants are also provided.
3170 Just as for \c{%!<env>} the argument should be written as a string if
3171 it contains characters that would not be legal in an identifier. See
3174 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
3176 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
3177 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
3178 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
3179 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
3181 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
3182 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
3183 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
3184 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
3188 \c inc word [table+2*i]
3192 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
3193 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
3196 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
3197 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
3198 terminate the loop, like this:
3213 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
3215 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
3216 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
3217 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
3218 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
3219 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
3220 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
3222 Note a maximum repeat count is limited by 62 bit number, though it
3223 is hardly possible that you ever need anything bigger.
3226 \H{while} \i{Conditional Loops}: \i\c{%while}
3228 The directives \c{%while} and \i\c{%endwhile} combine preprocessor
3229 loops with conditional assembly, allowing the enclosed chunk of
3230 code to be replicated as long as certain conditions are met:
3232 \c %while<condition>
3233 \c ; some code which only repeats while <condition> is met
3237 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3239 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3241 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3243 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3244 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3245 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3247 \c %include "macros.mac"
3249 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3250 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3252 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3253 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3254 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3255 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3256 line using the \c{-i} option.
3258 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3259 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3262 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3263 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3264 \c ; now define some macros
3267 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3268 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3269 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3271 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3272 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3273 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3276 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3278 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3279 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3280 be the include-path-resolved version of the filename, if the file
3281 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3285 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3287 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3288 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3291 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3293 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3294 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3295 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3297 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3298 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3299 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3301 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3302 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3307 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3308 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3309 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3312 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3314 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3315 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3316 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3317 described in \k{macropkg}.
3319 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3320 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted. In NASM
3321 2.04 and 2.05 the unquoted form would be macro-expanded; this is no
3322 longer true. Thus, the following lines are equivalent:
3327 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3328 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3329 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3331 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3333 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3334 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3335 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3336 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3337 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3338 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3339 able to nest these loops.
3341 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3342 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3343 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3344 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3345 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3348 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3349 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3351 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3352 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} takes an optional argument,
3353 which is the name of the context. For example:
3357 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can have
3358 several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can still be
3359 distinguished. If no name is given, the context is unnamed (this is
3360 normally used when both the \c{%push} and the \c{%pop} are inside a
3361 single macro definition.)
3363 The directive \c{%pop}, taking one optional argument, removes the top
3364 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3365 labels associated with it. If an argument is given, it must match the
3366 name of the current context, otherwise it will issue an error.
3369 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3371 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3372 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3373 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3374 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3375 above could be implemented by means of:
3391 and invoked by means of, for example,
3399 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3402 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3403 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3404 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3407 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3409 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3410 a particular context, in just the same way:
3412 \c %define %$localmac 3
3414 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3415 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3416 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3419 \S{ctxfallthrough} \i{Context Fall-Through Lookup}
3421 Context fall-through lookup (automatic searching of outer contexts)
3422 is a feature that was added in NASM version 0.98.03. Unfortunately,
3423 this feature is unintuitive and can result in buggy code that would
3424 have otherwise been prevented by NASM's error reporting. As a result,
3425 this feature has been \e{deprecated}. NASM version 2.09 will issue a
3426 warning when usage of this \e{deprecated} feature is detected. Starting
3427 with NASM version 2.10, usage of this \e{deprecated} feature will simply
3428 result in an \e{expression syntax error}.
3430 An example usage of this \e{deprecated} feature follows:
3434 \c %assign %$external 1
3436 \c %assign %$internal 1
3437 \c mov eax, %$external
3438 \c mov eax, %$internal
3443 As demonstrated, \c{%$external} is being defined in the \c{ctx1}
3444 context and referenced within the \c{ctx2} context. With context
3445 fall-through lookup, referencing an undefined context-local macro
3446 like this implicitly searches through all outer contexts until a match
3447 is made or isn't found in any context. As a result, \c{%$external}
3448 referenced within the \c{ctx2} context would implicitly use \c{%$external}
3449 as defined in \c{ctx1}. Most people would expect NASM to issue an error in
3450 this situation because \c{%$external} was never defined within \c{ctx2} and also
3451 isn't qualified with the proper context depth, \c{%$$external}.
3453 Here is a revision of the above example with proper context depth:
3457 \c %assign %$external 1
3459 \c %assign %$internal 1
3460 \c mov eax, %$$external
3461 \c mov eax, %$internal
3466 As demonstrated, \c{%$external} is still being defined in the \c{ctx1}
3467 context and referenced within the \c{ctx2} context. However, the
3468 reference to \c{%$external} within \c{ctx2} has been fully qualified with
3469 the proper context depth, \c{%$$external}, and thus is no longer ambiguous,
3470 unintuitive or erroneous.
3473 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3475 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3476 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3477 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3478 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3479 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3481 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3482 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3483 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3488 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3491 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3493 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3494 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3495 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3511 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3525 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3530 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3531 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3532 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3533 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3536 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3537 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3538 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3539 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3540 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3542 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3543 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3544 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3545 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3546 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3548 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3570 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3571 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3572 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3573 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3576 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3578 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3579 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3581 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3583 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3585 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3588 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3590 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3591 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3592 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3594 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3595 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3596 convenient to use and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3597 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3601 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3602 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3603 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3610 \c %pop ; restore original context
3612 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3613 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3614 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3615 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3618 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3620 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3621 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3622 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3623 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3624 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3628 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3629 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3630 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3632 \c %stacksize flat64
3634 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3635 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3636 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3640 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3641 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3642 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3646 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3647 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3648 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3649 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3650 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3651 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3652 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3656 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3658 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3659 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3660 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3661 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3662 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3663 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3664 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3666 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3667 An example of its use is the following:
3671 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3672 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3673 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3674 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3676 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3677 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3678 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3683 \c leave ; restore old bp
3686 \c %pop ; restore original context
3688 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3689 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3690 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3691 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3692 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3693 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3694 as shown in the example.
3697 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3699 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3700 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3701 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3702 right macros by means of code like this:
3707 \c ; do some different setup
3709 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3712 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3713 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3714 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3715 knowing what went wrong.
3717 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3722 \c ; do some different setup
3724 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3728 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3729 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3730 depend on symbol values.
3732 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3733 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3734 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3737 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3738 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3739 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3740 the user. For example:
3743 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3744 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3748 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3750 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3751 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3753 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of another
3754 preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3756 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3757 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3759 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3761 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3762 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3763 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3764 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3765 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3766 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3769 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3770 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3771 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3773 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3775 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3776 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3777 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3778 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3779 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3780 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3782 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3783 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3787 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3789 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3790 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3791 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3792 could be used at some other point in your code.
3794 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3795 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3796 could do that as follows:
3798 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3800 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3802 If the name of the environment variable contains non-identifier
3803 characters, you can use string quotes to surround the name of the
3804 variable, for example:
3806 \c %defstr C_colon %!'C:'
3809 \S{final} \i\c{%final} Directive
3811 The \c{%final} directive is used to delay preprocessing of a line
3812 until all other "normal" preprocessing is complete. Multiple
3813 \c{%final} directives are processed in the opposite order of their
3814 declaration, last one first and first one last.
3817 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3819 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3820 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3821 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3822 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3823 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3825 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3826 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3827 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3831 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3833 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3834 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3835 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3836 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3837 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3838 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3839 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3841 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3842 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3845 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3847 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3848 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3849 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3850 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3851 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3852 would be equivalent to:
3860 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3861 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3862 values will be present in memory.
3865 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3867 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3868 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3877 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3879 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3880 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3881 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3882 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3883 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3884 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3886 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3887 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3888 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3889 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3890 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3891 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3892 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3893 here'. You could then write a macro
3895 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3904 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3905 find the crash point.
3908 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3910 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3911 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3912 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3913 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3914 mode-dependent macros.
3916 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3918 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3919 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3922 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3923 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3924 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3925 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3929 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3931 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3934 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3935 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3938 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3939 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3940 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3942 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3943 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3944 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3945 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3947 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3948 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3949 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3950 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3953 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3954 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3955 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3956 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3957 local time as if it was UTC.
3959 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3960 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3961 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3962 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3963 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
3966 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
3967 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
3968 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
3969 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
3970 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
3971 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
3972 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
3973 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
3974 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
3977 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
3980 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
3981 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
3982 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
3983 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
3985 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
3986 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
3989 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
3991 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
3992 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
3993 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
3994 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
3996 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
3997 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
3998 change in future versions of NASM.}
4001 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
4003 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
4004 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
4005 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
4006 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
4008 \c{STRUC} takes one or two parameters. The first parameter is the name
4009 of the data type. The second, optional parameter is the base offset of
4010 the structure. The name of the data type is defined as a symbol with
4011 the value of the base offset, and the name of the data type with the
4012 suffix \c{_size} appended to it is defined as an \c{EQU} giving the
4013 size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been issued, you are
4014 defining the structure, and should define fields using the \c{RESB}
4015 family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish
4018 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
4019 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
4030 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
4031 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
4032 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
4033 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
4035 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero by default
4036 is a side effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
4037 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
4038 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
4049 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
4050 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
4052 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
4053 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
4054 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
4055 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
4056 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
4057 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
4058 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
4060 Sometimes you only have the address of the structure displaced by an
4061 offset. For example, consider this standard stack frame setup:
4067 In this case, you could access an element by subtracting the offset:
4069 \c mov [ebp - 40 + mytype.word], ax
4071 However, if you do not want to repeat this offset, you can use -40 as
4074 \c struc mytype, -40
4076 And access an element this way:
4078 \c mov [ebp + mytype.word], ax
4081 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
4082 \i{Instances of Structures}
4084 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
4085 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
4086 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
4087 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
4088 you code something like this:
4093 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
4094 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
4095 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
4096 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
4100 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
4101 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
4102 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
4103 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
4104 they were specified in the structure definition.
4106 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
4107 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
4108 the \c{AT} line. For example:
4110 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
4113 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
4114 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
4118 \c db 'hello, world'
4122 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
4124 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
4125 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
4126 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
4127 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
4129 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
4130 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
4131 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
4132 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
4133 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
4135 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
4136 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
4137 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
4138 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
4139 perform the alignment.
4141 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
4142 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
4143 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
4144 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
4145 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
4146 except for special purposes.
4148 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
4149 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
4150 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
4151 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
4154 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
4155 be used within structure definitions:
4172 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
4173 relative to the base of the structure.
4175 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
4176 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
4177 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
4178 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
4179 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
4180 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
4181 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
4183 Both \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} do call \c{SECTALIGN} macro implicitly.
4184 See \k{sectalign} for details.
4186 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
4189 \S{sectalign} \i\c{SECTALIGN}: Section Alignment
4191 The \c{SECTALIGN} macros provides a way to modify alignment attribute
4192 of output file section. Unlike the \c{align=} attribute (which is allowed
4193 at section definition only) the \c{SECTALIGN} macro may be used at any time.
4195 For example the directive
4199 sets the section alignment requirements to 16 bytes. Once increased it can
4200 not be decreased, the magnitude may grow only.
4202 Note that \c{ALIGN} (see \k{align}) calls the \c{SECTALIGN} macro implicitly
4203 so the active section alignment requirements may be updated. This is by default
4204 behaviour, if for some reason you want the \c{ALIGN} do not call \c{SECTALIGN}
4205 at all use the directive
4209 It is still possible to turn in on again by
4214 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
4216 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
4217 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
4218 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
4219 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
4221 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
4225 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
4227 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
4228 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
4229 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
4230 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
4231 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
4232 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
4239 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
4245 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
4247 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
4248 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
4249 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
4250 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
4251 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
4252 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
4253 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
4256 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
4257 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
4258 and an optional jump threshold override. If (for any reason) you need
4259 to turn off the jump completely just set jump threshold value to -1
4260 (or set it to \c{nojmp}). The following modes are possible:
4262 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
4263 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
4266 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
4267 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
4268 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
4270 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
4271 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4274 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
4275 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4278 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
4279 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
4280 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
4281 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
4283 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
4284 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
4285 are used internally by this macro package.
4288 \H{pkg_fp} \i\c\{fp}: Floating-point macros
4290 This packages contains the following floating-point convenience macros:
4292 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
4293 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
4294 \c %define QNaN __QNaN__
4295 \c %define SNaN __SNaN__
4297 \c %define float8(x) __float8__(x)
4298 \c %define float16(x) __float16__(x)
4299 \c %define float32(x) __float32__(x)
4300 \c %define float64(x) __float64__(x)
4301 \c %define float80m(x) __float80m__(x)
4302 \c %define float80e(x) __float80e__(x)
4303 \c %define float128l(x) __float128l__(x)
4304 \c %define float128h(x) __float128h__(x)
4307 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
4309 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
4310 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
4311 directives. These are described in this chapter.
4313 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
4314 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
4315 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
4316 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
4317 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
4318 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
4320 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
4323 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
4324 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
4325 order to control particular features of that file format. These
4326 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
4327 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
4330 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
4332 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
4333 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
4334 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
4335 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
4337 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
4338 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
4339 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
4340 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
4341 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
4342 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
4343 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
4344 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
4346 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
4347 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
4348 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
4349 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
4350 device drivers and boot loader software.
4352 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
4353 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
4354 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
4355 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
4357 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
4358 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
4359 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
4360 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
4361 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
4364 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
4365 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
4366 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
4368 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
4369 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
4370 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
4371 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
4372 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
4375 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
4376 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4377 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4378 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4381 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4382 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4383 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4385 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4387 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4389 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4390 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4393 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4395 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4396 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4397 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4398 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4401 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4402 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4403 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4404 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4405 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4406 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4408 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4409 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4410 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4411 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4413 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4415 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4418 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4419 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4420 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4421 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4422 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4423 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4424 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4427 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4428 \k{multisec}, all support
4429 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4430 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4431 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4432 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4436 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4438 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4439 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4440 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4441 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4442 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4443 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4444 it. So the user-level directive
4448 expands to the two lines
4450 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4453 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4454 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4455 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4457 \c %macro writefile 2+
4467 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4474 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4475 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4476 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4477 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4478 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4479 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4480 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4481 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4482 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4483 code in any of several separate code sections.
4486 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4488 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4489 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4490 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4491 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4492 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4494 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4502 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4503 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4504 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4506 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4507 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4509 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4510 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4512 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4513 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4514 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4515 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4517 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4519 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4521 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4523 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4527 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4528 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4532 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4533 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4534 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4535 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4536 needs to be made resident.
4539 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4541 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4542 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4543 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4544 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4545 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4546 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4548 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4549 argument is the name of a symbol:
4552 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4554 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4555 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4556 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4557 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4558 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4559 by means of the directive
4561 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4563 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4564 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4565 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4567 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4568 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4569 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4572 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4574 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4575 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4576 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4577 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4578 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4580 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4581 the definition of the symbol.
4583 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4584 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4585 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4591 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4592 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4593 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4596 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4598 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4599 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4603 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4605 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4606 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4607 uninitialized data section, so that
4611 is similar in function to
4618 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4619 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4620 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4621 at the same piece of memory.
4623 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4624 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4625 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4626 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4628 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4629 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4631 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4632 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4633 only one argument at a time.
4636 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4638 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4639 are available on the specified CPU.
4643 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4645 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4647 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4649 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4651 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4653 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4655 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4657 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4659 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4661 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4663 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4665 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4667 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4669 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4671 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4673 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4675 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4677 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4678 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4679 instructions are available.
4682 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4684 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4685 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4688 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4690 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4692 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4694 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4696 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4698 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4700 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4702 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4703 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4704 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4706 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4707 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4710 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4712 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4713 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4714 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4715 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4716 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4717 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4719 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4720 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4721 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4722 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4723 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4724 The extensions are given with each format below.
4727 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4729 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4730 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4731 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4732 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4733 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4736 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4737 how NASM handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4739 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4740 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4741 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4742 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4744 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4745 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4746 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4747 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4750 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4752 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4753 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4754 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4755 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4757 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4764 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4765 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4766 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4767 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4768 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4769 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4770 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4773 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4774 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4776 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4777 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4778 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4779 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4781 \c section .data align=16
4783 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4784 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4786 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4787 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4788 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4789 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4792 \S{multisec} \i{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} Support for the \c{bin} Format
4794 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4795 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4797 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4798 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4801 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4802 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4805 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4806 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4809 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4810 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4813 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4814 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4815 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4817 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4818 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4820 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4823 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4824 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4827 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4828 alignment has been specified.
4830 \b Sections may not overlap.
4832 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4833 which may be used in your code.
4835 \S{map}\i{Map Files}
4837 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4838 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4839 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4840 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4841 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4842 brackets must be used.
4845 \H{ithfmt} \i\c{ith}: \i{Intel Hex} Output
4847 The \c{ith} file format produces Intel hex-format files. Just as the
4848 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4849 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4852 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4853 the \c{ith} file format.
4855 \c{ith} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.ith}.
4858 \H{srecfmt} \i\c{srec}: \i{Motorola S-Records} Output
4860 The \c{srec} file format produces Motorola S-records files. Just as the
4861 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4862 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4865 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4866 the \c{srec} file format.
4868 \c{srec} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.srec}.
4871 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4873 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4874 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4875 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4876 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4878 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4880 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4881 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4882 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4883 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4886 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4887 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4888 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4890 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4891 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4892 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4894 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4895 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4896 address of the segment. So, for example:
4905 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4906 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4907 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4910 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4911 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4916 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4918 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4920 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4921 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4924 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4925 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4927 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4928 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4929 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4930 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4932 \c segment code private align=16
4934 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4935 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4936 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4938 The available qualifiers are:
4940 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4941 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4942 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4943 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4944 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4945 than stuck end-to-end.
4947 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4948 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4949 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4950 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4951 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4952 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4953 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4954 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4955 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4957 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4958 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4959 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4960 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4962 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4963 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4964 overlay-capable linker.
4966 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
4967 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
4968 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
4969 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
4971 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
4972 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
4973 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
4974 defines the group if it is not already defined.
4976 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
4977 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
4978 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
4979 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
4980 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
4981 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
4983 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
4984 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
4987 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
4989 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
4990 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
4991 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
5000 \c ; some uninitialized data
5002 \c group dgroup data bss
5004 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
5005 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
5006 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
5007 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
5008 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
5011 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
5012 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
5013 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
5014 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
5015 base rather than the segment base.
5017 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
5018 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
5019 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
5020 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
5022 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
5023 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
5024 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
5025 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
5028 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
5030 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
5031 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
5032 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
5033 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
5034 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
5035 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
5036 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
5038 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
5041 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
5042 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
5044 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
5045 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
5046 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
5047 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
5049 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
5050 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
5051 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
5054 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
5056 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
5057 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
5058 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
5059 once you have imported it. For example:
5061 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
5064 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
5065 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
5067 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
5068 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
5069 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
5070 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
5072 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
5073 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
5074 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
5075 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
5076 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
5077 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
5080 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
5081 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
5082 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
5083 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
5084 available attributes are:
5086 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
5087 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
5088 frequently used symbols imported by name.
5090 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
5091 does not make use of any initialized data.
5093 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
5094 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
5095 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
5097 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
5098 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
5104 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
5105 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
5106 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
5109 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
5112 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
5113 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
5114 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
5115 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
5116 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
5120 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
5121 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
5123 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
5127 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
5128 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
5129 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
5130 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
5132 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
5133 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
5134 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
5136 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
5137 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
5138 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
5141 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
5143 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
5144 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
5147 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
5149 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
5150 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
5151 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
5154 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
5155 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
5156 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
5160 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
5161 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
5163 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
5164 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
5165 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
5167 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
5168 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
5170 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
5171 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
5172 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
5173 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
5174 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
5176 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
5177 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
5178 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
5179 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
5180 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
5183 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
5184 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
5186 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
5187 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
5188 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
5189 declarations could equivalently be
5191 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
5192 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
5194 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
5195 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
5196 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
5198 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
5199 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
5200 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
5203 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
5205 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
5206 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
5207 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
5208 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
5210 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
5212 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
5213 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
5214 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
5215 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
5216 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
5217 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
5218 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
5219 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
5222 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5223 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
5225 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
5226 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5227 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5228 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
5229 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
5232 The available qualifiers are:
5234 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
5235 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
5236 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
5239 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
5240 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
5241 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
5242 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
5244 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
5245 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
5248 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
5249 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
5250 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
5251 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
5252 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
5255 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5256 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
5257 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
5258 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
5259 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
5260 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
5261 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
5262 for data (and BSS) sections.
5263 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
5264 alignment), though the value does not matter.
5266 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5269 \c section .text code align=16
5270 \c section .data data align=4
5271 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
5272 \c section .bss bss align=4
5274 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
5276 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
5278 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
5279 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
5280 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
5281 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
5282 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
5283 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
5284 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
5285 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
5286 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
5287 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
5288 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
5289 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
5290 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
5292 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
5293 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
5294 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
5296 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
5298 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
5300 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
5301 line to source code:
5305 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
5306 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
5307 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
5308 still be perfectly possible.
5310 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
5311 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
5312 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
5313 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
5314 table." Its typical use would be:
5317 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
5318 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
5319 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
5322 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5323 \c push DWORD caption
5326 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
5327 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5328 \c ; for exception handler
5332 \c push DWORD handler
5333 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
5334 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
5336 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
5337 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
5340 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5341 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5343 \c section .drectve info
5344 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5346 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
5347 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
5348 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
5349 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
5350 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
5351 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
5352 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
5353 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
5354 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
5355 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
5356 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
5357 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
5358 caused application failure.
5360 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
5361 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
5362 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
5363 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
5364 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
5367 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
5369 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
5370 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
5371 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
5372 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
5373 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
5375 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
5377 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
5378 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
5379 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
5381 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
5387 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
5388 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
5389 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
5390 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
5393 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5394 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5396 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
5397 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
5398 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
5399 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
5400 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
5401 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
5402 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5403 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5404 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5406 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5407 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5410 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5414 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5415 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5416 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5417 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5418 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5419 these image-relative references:
5421 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5422 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5423 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5427 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5428 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5430 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5431 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5432 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5433 become apparent in next paragraph.
5435 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5438 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5439 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5440 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5441 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5443 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5445 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5446 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5447 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5448 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5449 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5450 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5451 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5452 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5453 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5454 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5455 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5458 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5459 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5460 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5461 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5462 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5463 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5464 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5465 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5466 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5467 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5468 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5469 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5470 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5471 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5472 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5473 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5474 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5475 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5476 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5477 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5478 no, no trace of failure is left.
5480 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5481 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5482 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5483 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5484 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5485 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5486 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5487 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5488 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5489 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5490 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5491 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5492 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5493 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5494 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5495 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5496 terminating the application.
5498 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5499 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5500 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5501 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5502 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5507 \c extern MessageBoxA
5513 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5515 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5516 \c ; for exception handler
5522 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5525 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5526 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5528 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5529 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5530 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5531 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5532 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5533 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5534 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5535 \c section .drectve info
5536 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5538 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5539 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5540 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5541 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5542 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5543 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5544 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5545 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5546 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5547 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5548 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5549 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5550 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5551 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5553 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5554 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5555 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5556 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5557 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5558 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5559 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5560 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5561 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5562 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5563 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5564 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5565 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5566 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5567 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5570 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5571 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5574 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5577 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5578 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5579 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5582 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5583 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5584 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5585 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5586 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5589 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5590 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5591 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5592 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5593 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5595 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5596 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5598 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5599 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5601 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5602 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5603 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5604 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5606 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5608 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5609 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5610 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5611 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5612 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5615 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5616 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5619 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5621 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5622 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5624 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5626 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5627 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5628 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5630 \H{machofmt} \I{Mach-O}\i\c{macho32} and \i\c{macho64}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5632 The \c{macho32} and \c{macho64} output formts produces \c{Mach-O}
5633 object files suitable for linking with the \i{MacOS X} linker.
5634 \i\c{macho} is a synonym for \c{macho32}.
5636 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5638 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf32} and \i\c{elf64}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5639 Format} Object Files
5641 The \c{elf32} and \c{elf64} output formats generate \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V},
5642 including \i{Solaris x86}, \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf}
5643 provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5644 \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5646 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5648 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5649 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5650 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5651 most systems which support ELF.
5653 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5654 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5656 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5657 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5658 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5659 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5660 names}, but may still be
5661 overridden by these qualifiers.
5663 The available qualifiers are:
5665 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5666 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5667 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5669 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5670 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5673 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5674 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5677 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5678 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5679 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5680 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5682 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5683 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5684 requirements of the section.
5686 \b \i\c{tls} defines the section to be one which contains
5687 thread local variables.
5689 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5692 \I\c{.text} \I\c{.rodata} \I\c{.lrodata} \I\c{.data} \I\c{.ldata}
5693 \I\c{.bss} \I\c{.lbss} \I\c{.tdata} \I\c{.tbss} \I\c\{.comment}
5695 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5696 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5697 \c section .lrodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5698 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5699 \c section .ldata progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5700 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5701 \c section .lbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5702 \c section .tdata progbits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5703 \c section .tbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5704 \c section .comment progbits noalloc noexec nowrite align=1
5705 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5707 (Any section name other than those in the above table
5708 is treated by default like \c{other} in the above table.
5709 Please note that section names are case sensitive.)
5712 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5713 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5715 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5716 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5717 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5718 be able to generate a variety of ELF specific relocation types in ELF
5719 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5721 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5722 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5723 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5724 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5727 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5728 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5729 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5730 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5732 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5733 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5734 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5735 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5736 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5737 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5739 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5740 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5741 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5742 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5744 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5745 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5746 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5747 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5748 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5749 address of the symbol.
5751 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5752 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5753 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5754 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5755 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5756 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5759 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5760 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5761 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5762 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5763 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5764 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5766 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5767 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5769 \S{elftls} \i{Thread Local Storage}\I{TLS}: \c{elf} Special
5770 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5772 \b In ELF32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5773 \c{wrt ..tlsie} \I\c{..tlsie}
5774 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5775 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5776 of the symbol with code such as:
5778 \c mov eax,[tid wrt ..tlsie]
5782 \b In ELF64 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5783 \c{wrt ..gottpoff} \I\c{..gottpoff}
5784 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5785 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5786 of the symbol with code such as:
5788 \c mov rax,[rel tid wrt ..gottpoff]
5792 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5793 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5795 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5796 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5797 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5798 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5799 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5800 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5801 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5802 to specify these features.
5804 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5805 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5806 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5807 \c{data}.) For example:
5809 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5811 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5812 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5814 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5815 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5816 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5817 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5819 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5821 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5822 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5823 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5825 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5828 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5831 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5832 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5834 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5835 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5839 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5840 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5842 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5843 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5844 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5845 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5846 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5847 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5849 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5851 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5852 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5855 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5856 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5858 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5859 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5860 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5861 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5862 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5863 these relocations is generated.
5865 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5866 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5868 \c{ELF32} and \c{ELF64} provide debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5869 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5870 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5872 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5874 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5875 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5876 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5877 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5878 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5879 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5880 implementation does not.
5882 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5884 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5885 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5886 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5887 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5890 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5891 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5893 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5894 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5895 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5896 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5897 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5898 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5899 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5901 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5903 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5904 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5905 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5906 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5907 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5909 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5910 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5914 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5916 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5917 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5918 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5919 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5922 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5923 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5925 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5926 of view). It supports no special directives, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT},
5927 and no extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5928 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}. The
5929 only special symbol supported is \c{..start}.
5932 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5935 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5936 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5937 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5938 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5940 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5941 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5942 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5943 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5945 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5946 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5947 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5948 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5949 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5951 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5952 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5955 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5957 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5958 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5959 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5960 which is the name of the module:
5962 \c library mylib.rdl
5965 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
5967 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
5968 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
5969 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
5974 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
5975 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
5976 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
5978 \c module $kernel.core
5981 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5984 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
5985 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
5986 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
5987 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
5988 is a procedure (function) or data object.
5990 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
5993 \c global sys_open:export
5995 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
5996 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
5998 \c global sys_open:export proc
6000 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
6001 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
6003 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
6006 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} Directive\I{EXTERN,
6009 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
6010 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
6011 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
6012 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
6013 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
6014 (function) or data object. For example:
6017 \c extern _open:import
6018 \c extern _printf:import proc
6019 \c extern _errno:import data
6021 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
6022 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
6025 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
6027 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
6028 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
6029 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{output/outform.h} or on the
6030 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
6032 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
6033 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
6034 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
6035 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
6036 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
6037 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
6038 and in what order they happen.
6040 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
6042 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
6044 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
6045 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
6046 different object format, because each object format defines its own
6047 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
6048 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
6049 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
6050 native object format selected:
6052 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
6053 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
6055 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
6056 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
6057 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
6058 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
6059 the final diagnostic output.
6061 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
6062 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
6063 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
6064 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
6065 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
6066 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
6067 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
6069 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
6070 them all to its output file.
6073 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
6075 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
6076 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
6077 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
6078 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
6079 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
6082 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
6084 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
6085 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
6086 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
6087 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
6088 support the \c{.COM} format.
6090 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
6091 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
6092 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
6093 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
6094 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
6095 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
6096 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
6098 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
6102 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
6104 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
6105 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
6107 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
6108 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
6109 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
6110 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
6111 An LZH archiver can be found at
6112 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
6113 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
6114 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
6115 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
6116 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
6117 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
6118 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
6119 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
6121 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
6122 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
6123 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
6124 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
6125 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
6126 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
6127 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
6129 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
6130 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
6131 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
6132 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
6133 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
6134 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
6145 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
6146 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
6147 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
6148 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
6149 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
6150 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
6153 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
6154 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
6155 into the resulting executable file.
6161 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
6162 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
6163 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
6164 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
6169 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
6173 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
6175 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
6177 \c segment stack stack
6181 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
6182 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
6183 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
6184 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
6185 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
6186 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
6189 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
6190 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
6191 world' and then exit.
6194 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
6196 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
6197 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
6198 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
6199 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
6200 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
6203 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6204 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
6205 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
6207 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
6208 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
6209 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
6210 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
6211 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
6212 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
6213 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
6214 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
6215 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
6217 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
6218 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
6219 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
6220 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
6221 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
6222 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
6223 explicitly issue one of your own.
6225 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
6226 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
6227 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
6228 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
6230 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
6231 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
6232 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
6233 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
6236 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
6237 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
6241 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
6243 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
6244 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
6245 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
6249 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6251 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
6252 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
6253 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
6254 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
6262 \c ; put your code here
6266 \c ; put data items here
6270 \c ; put uninitialized data here
6272 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
6273 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
6274 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
6277 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
6278 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
6279 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
6280 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
6281 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
6284 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
6286 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
6288 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
6289 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
6290 and give the desired file name.
6293 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6295 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
6296 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
6297 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
6298 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
6299 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
6300 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
6303 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
6305 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
6306 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
6307 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
6308 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
6309 adjust address references within the file when generating the
6310 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
6311 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
6312 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
6313 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
6315 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
6317 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
6318 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
6319 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
6320 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
6323 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
6325 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
6326 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
6327 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
6328 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
6329 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
6330 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
6333 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
6334 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
6335 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
6336 though it is not actually code.
6338 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
6339 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
6340 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
6341 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
6344 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
6346 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
6347 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
6348 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
6349 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
6352 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
6354 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
6355 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6356 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6357 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
6358 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
6359 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
6360 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
6361 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
6363 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
6364 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
6380 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
6381 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
6383 If you then declare an external like this:
6387 then the macro will expand it as
6390 \c %define printf _printf
6392 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
6393 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
6395 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
6396 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
6397 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
6399 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
6401 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
6403 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
6404 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
6405 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
6408 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
6409 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
6410 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
6411 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
6412 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
6413 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
6414 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
6415 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
6416 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
6417 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
6419 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
6420 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
6421 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
6422 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
6423 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
6424 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
6425 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
6427 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
6428 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
6429 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
6430 segment part of the full data item address).
6432 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
6433 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
6434 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
6435 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
6436 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
6437 pointers you are passed.
6439 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6440 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6441 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6442 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6443 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6445 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6446 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6447 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6448 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6449 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6450 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6451 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6452 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6453 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6454 variables in this latter case.
6456 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6457 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6458 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6459 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6463 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6465 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6466 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6467 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6468 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6470 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6471 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6472 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6474 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6475 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6478 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6479 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6480 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6481 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6482 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6483 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6484 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6485 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6487 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6488 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6489 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6490 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6491 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6492 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6493 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6494 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6495 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6496 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6497 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6498 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6499 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6502 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6503 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6504 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6506 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6507 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6508 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6509 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6511 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6512 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6513 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6516 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6517 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6518 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6519 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6520 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6521 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6522 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6525 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6526 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6527 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6528 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6529 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6530 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6531 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6532 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6533 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6534 sequence points without performance suffering.
6536 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6537 The following example is for small model:
6544 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6545 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6549 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6553 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6554 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6555 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6556 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6557 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6558 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6560 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6561 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6565 \c ; and then, further down...
6567 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6568 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6570 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6572 \c ; then those data items...
6577 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6579 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6582 \c int myint = 1234;
6583 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6585 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6586 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6587 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6590 \c push word [myint]
6591 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6592 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6596 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6597 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6598 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6599 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6600 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6601 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6602 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6603 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6604 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6605 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6609 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6611 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6612 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6613 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6614 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6615 accessed from assembler as
6621 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6622 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6623 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6629 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6630 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6631 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6632 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6633 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6634 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6635 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6636 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6638 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6639 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6640 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6641 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6642 one offset and using just that.
6644 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6645 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6646 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6647 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6648 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6655 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6656 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6657 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6658 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6659 out how your own compiler does it.
6662 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6664 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6665 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6666 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6667 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6668 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6670 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6671 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6673 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6680 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6681 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6686 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6687 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6688 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6690 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6691 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6692 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6693 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6694 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6695 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6696 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6698 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6699 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6700 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6701 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6702 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6703 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6704 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6706 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6707 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6708 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6710 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6718 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6719 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6720 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6725 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6726 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6727 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6730 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6732 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6733 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6735 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6736 not required for Pascal.
6738 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6739 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6740 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6741 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6742 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6743 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6744 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6745 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6746 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6747 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6748 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6749 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6751 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6753 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6755 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6756 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6757 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6760 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6762 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6763 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6764 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6765 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6768 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6769 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6770 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6772 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6773 control to the callee.
6775 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6776 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6777 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6778 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6779 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6780 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6781 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6782 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6784 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6785 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6786 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6787 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6788 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6789 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6790 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6792 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6793 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6794 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6796 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6797 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6798 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6799 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6800 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6801 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6802 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6803 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6804 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6805 \c{RETF} instruction.
6807 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6808 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6809 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6810 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6811 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6812 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6815 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6816 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6819 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6820 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6826 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6827 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6828 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6832 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6834 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6836 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6837 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6841 \c ; and then, further down...
6843 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6844 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6845 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6846 \c call far SomeFunc
6848 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6850 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6851 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6854 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6857 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6858 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6859 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6860 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6861 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6864 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6865 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6867 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6868 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6870 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6871 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6873 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6874 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6877 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6879 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6880 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6881 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6882 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6883 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6884 generated with an operand.
6886 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6887 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6888 reverse order. For example:
6896 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6897 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6898 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6903 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6904 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6905 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6906 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6907 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6908 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6912 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6914 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6915 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6916 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6917 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6918 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6921 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6922 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6923 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6924 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6925 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6926 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6927 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6928 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6929 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6930 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6931 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6932 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6936 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6938 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6939 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6940 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6943 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6945 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6946 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6947 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6948 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6949 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6950 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6952 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6953 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6954 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6955 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6956 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6958 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6960 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6962 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
6963 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
6964 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
6965 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6967 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6968 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6969 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6971 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6972 control to the callee.
6974 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6975 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6976 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
6977 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
6978 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
6979 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
6980 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
6981 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6983 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
6984 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
6985 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
6986 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
6987 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
6988 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
6989 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
6990 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
6991 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
6992 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
6993 and type of the remaining ones.
6995 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
6996 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6997 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
6999 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
7000 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
7001 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
7004 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
7005 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
7006 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
7008 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
7009 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
7010 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
7011 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
7012 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
7013 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
7014 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
7017 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
7018 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
7019 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
7020 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
7021 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
7022 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
7023 still pushed in right-to-left order.
7025 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
7032 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
7033 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
7037 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
7040 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
7041 assembly code, you would do something like this:
7045 \c ; and then, further down...
7047 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
7048 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
7050 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
7052 \c ; then those data items...
7057 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
7059 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
7061 \c int myint = 1234;
7062 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
7065 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
7067 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
7068 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
7069 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
7070 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
7071 accessed from assembler as
7076 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
7077 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
7078 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
7083 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
7084 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
7085 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
7086 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
7087 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
7088 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
7089 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
7090 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
7091 are also 4 bytes long.
7093 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
7094 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
7095 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
7096 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
7097 one offset and using just that.
7099 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
7100 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
7101 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
7102 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
7103 Typically, you might find that a structure like
7110 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
7111 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
7112 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
7113 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
7114 out how your own compiler does it.
7117 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
7119 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
7120 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
7121 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
7122 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
7123 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
7125 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
7132 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
7133 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
7138 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
7139 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
7140 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
7142 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
7143 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
7144 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
7145 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
7146 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
7147 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
7148 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
7150 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
7151 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
7152 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
7155 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
7158 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
7159 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
7160 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
7161 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
7162 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
7164 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
7165 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
7166 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
7167 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
7169 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
7170 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
7171 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
7172 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
7174 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
7177 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
7179 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
7180 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
7181 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
7182 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
7183 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
7184 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
7185 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
7187 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
7188 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
7189 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
7190 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
7191 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
7192 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
7195 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
7197 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
7200 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
7201 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
7203 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
7204 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
7205 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
7214 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
7216 \c ; the function body comes here
7223 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
7224 second leading underscore.)
7226 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
7227 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
7228 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
7229 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
7230 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
7232 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
7233 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
7234 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
7235 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
7236 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
7237 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
7238 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
7239 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
7240 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
7241 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
7242 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
7243 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
7244 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
7245 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
7246 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
7247 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
7249 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
7250 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
7251 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
7258 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
7262 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
7264 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
7265 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
7266 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
7267 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
7268 way this works is like this:
7270 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
7272 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
7273 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
7274 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
7275 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
7277 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
7278 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
7279 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
7280 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
7281 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
7282 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
7284 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
7285 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
7286 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
7289 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
7291 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
7292 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
7293 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
7294 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
7295 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
7296 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
7297 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
7298 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
7299 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
7302 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
7304 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
7305 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
7306 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
7307 has every necessary entry present.
7309 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
7312 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
7314 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
7315 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
7316 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
7317 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
7318 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
7319 items away from the library's data section in which they were
7322 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
7324 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
7330 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
7332 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
7337 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
7338 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
7339 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
7340 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
7341 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
7342 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
7343 effectively, it has become).
7345 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
7346 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
7349 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
7351 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
7352 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
7353 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
7354 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
7355 which resides elsewhere.
7357 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
7359 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
7361 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
7362 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
7363 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
7365 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
7366 functions by means of
7368 \c funcptr: dd my_function
7370 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
7372 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt ..sym
7374 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
7375 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
7376 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
7379 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
7381 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
7382 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
7383 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
7384 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
7385 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
7386 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
7387 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
7390 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
7391 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
7392 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
7393 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
7397 \S{link} Generating the Library File
7399 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
7400 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
7402 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
7403 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
7405 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
7406 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
7407 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
7408 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
7410 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
7412 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
7413 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
7416 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
7418 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
7419 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
7420 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
7421 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
7422 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
7423 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
7426 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
7428 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
7429 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
7430 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
7431 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
7432 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
7433 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
7434 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
7435 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
7437 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
7438 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7439 segment, so just coding, for example,
7441 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7443 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7444 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7447 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7448 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7449 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7450 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7452 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7454 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7455 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7456 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7457 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7458 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7459 segment to a 32-bit one.
7461 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7462 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7464 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7466 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7467 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7468 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7471 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7472 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7474 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7475 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7476 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7477 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7478 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7480 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7481 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7482 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7483 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7485 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7486 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7487 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7489 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7490 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7492 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7493 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7494 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7495 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7496 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7498 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7499 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7501 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7503 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7504 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7505 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7507 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7509 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7510 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7511 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7512 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7514 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7516 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7519 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7520 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7522 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7524 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7525 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7526 offset), and calls that address.
7529 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7531 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7532 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7533 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7534 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7535 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7537 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7538 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7539 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7540 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7544 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7545 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7546 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7547 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7549 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7550 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7551 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7552 instructions with implicit addressing:
7553 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7554 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7555 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7556 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7557 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7558 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7560 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7561 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7562 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7563 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7564 size from the code segment.
7566 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7567 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7568 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7569 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7570 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7571 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7576 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7577 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7580 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7581 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7584 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7586 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7587 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7588 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7589 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7591 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7592 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7593 registers, which still add their bases.
7595 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7596 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7597 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7598 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7599 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7601 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7602 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7603 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7604 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7605 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7607 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7608 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7609 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7610 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7612 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7613 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7614 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7617 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7619 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7620 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7622 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7623 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7624 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7625 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7627 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7628 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7629 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7630 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7631 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7632 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7633 can be used for this purpose.
7635 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7637 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7638 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7639 immediates to 32 bits.
7641 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7645 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7646 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7647 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7648 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7649 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7651 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7652 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7653 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7654 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7656 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7658 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7659 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7660 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7661 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7662 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7663 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7667 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7668 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7669 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7673 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7674 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7675 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7676 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7678 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7679 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7681 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7683 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7685 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/unix64abi}
7687 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7688 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7690 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7691 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7692 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7693 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7694 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7696 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7698 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7699 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7700 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7701 stack, and returned in \c{ST0} and \c{ST1}.
7703 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7705 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7707 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7709 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7711 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7713 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7715 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7717 \W{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}\c{http://www.nasm.us/links/win64abi}
7719 What follows is a simplified summary.
7721 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7722 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7723 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7724 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7725 use by the function without saving.
7727 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7729 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7730 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7731 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7733 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7735 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7737 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7739 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7741 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7743 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7744 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7745 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7746 that isn't listed here.
7749 \H{problems} Common Problems
7751 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7753 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7754 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7755 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7756 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7757 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7758 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7759 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7760 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7761 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7764 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7766 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7767 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7768 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7771 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7772 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7773 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7774 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7775 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7776 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7777 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7778 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7779 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7780 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7781 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7782 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7785 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7787 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7788 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7789 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7790 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7794 \c ; some boot sector code
7799 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7800 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7801 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7805 \c ; some boot sector code
7807 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7810 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7811 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7812 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7813 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7814 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7815 find out what's wrong with it.
7818 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7820 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7825 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7826 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7829 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7830 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7831 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7832 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7833 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7834 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7835 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7836 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7837 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7838 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7840 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7843 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7845 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7846 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7847 problem and generate sensible code.
7850 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7852 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7853 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7854 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7856 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
7857 (click on "Bug Tracker"), or if that fails then through one of the
7858 contacts in \k{contact}.
7860 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7861 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7862 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7863 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7864 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7865 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7868 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7871 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7872 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7874 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7875 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7876 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7877 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7878 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7879 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7882 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7883 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7884 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7886 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7887 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7888 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7889 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7890 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7891 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7892 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7893 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7895 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7896 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7897 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7898 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7899 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7900 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7901 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7902 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7903 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7904 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7905 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7906 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7907 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7909 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7910 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7911 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7912 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7913 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7914 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7915 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7916 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7917 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7918 should be 77 instead'.
7920 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7921 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7922 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7923 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7924 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7925 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7926 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7929 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7930 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7931 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7932 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7933 differently from us.
7936 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7938 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7940 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7943 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7944 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7945 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7946 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7947 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7949 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7950 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7951 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7952 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7956 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7958 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7959 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7960 are on a Unix system.
7963 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
7965 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
7967 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
7969 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
7970 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
7971 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
7972 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
7974 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
7975 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
7976 summary of command line options.
7979 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
7981 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
7982 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
7983 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
7984 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
7987 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
7988 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
7989 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
7990 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
7991 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
7993 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
7995 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
8000 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
8002 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
8003 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
8004 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
8005 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
8006 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
8007 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
8008 Then it will reach the code section.
8010 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
8011 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
8012 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
8013 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
8014 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
8015 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
8016 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
8019 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
8020 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
8021 only handle 2147483647 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
8022 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
8023 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
8024 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
8025 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
8026 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
8027 the instructions in your code section.
8029 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
8030 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
8031 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
8034 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
8038 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
8040 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
8041 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
8044 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
8047 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
8048 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
8049 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
8050 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
8051 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
8052 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
8055 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
8056 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
8057 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
8058 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
8060 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
8061 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
8062 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
8063 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
8064 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
8065 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
8066 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
8068 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
8069 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
8070 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
8071 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
8072 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
8074 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
8075 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
8076 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
8077 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
8078 you may still have to place some manually.
8080 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
8081 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
8082 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
8085 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
8086 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
8087 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
8088 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
8089 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
8090 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
8091 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
8092 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
8093 suppress disassembly of the data area.
8096 \S{ndisother} Other Options
8098 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
8099 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
8100 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
8101 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
8103 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
8104 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
8105 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
8106 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
8107 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
8111 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
8113 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
8114 possible, should be sent to
8115 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
8117 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}
8118 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
8119 new features as well.
8121 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
8123 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
8125 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
8126 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
8127 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
8128 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
8132 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}